Durango
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014
14WD01-126-AE Fifth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 201
7 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE .................................11
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . ..............................117
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................285
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................399
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................521
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................555
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................617
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................623
10
INDEX .....................................................................633
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis-
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4 INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
6 INTRODUCTION
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 9
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............14
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) ..............14
▫ KeyFob ............................15
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........16
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................18
▫ Replacement Keys .....................19
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............20
▫ General Information ....................20
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ To Arm The System ....................21
▫ Rearming The System ...................21
▫ To Disarm The System ..................22
▫ Tamper Alert .........................23
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................23
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........24
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........24
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................26
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters .......26
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........27
2
▫ General Information ....................28
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .29
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................29
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................33
▫ Manual Door Locks ....................33
▫ Power Door Locks .....................34
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................35
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ .................37
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................42
▫ Power Windows .......................42
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................46
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................46
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............47
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ................50
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................54
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions .....55
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....58
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .59
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ......60
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped ............................61
▫ Energy Management Feature ..............62
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ..................62
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .63
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) ..........................67
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ...........68
▫ Seat Belt Extender .....................68
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................69
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features ...........71
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ....75
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............83
▫ Child Restraints .......................84
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .110
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................111
▫ Transporting Passengers .................111
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................112
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................113
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................115
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa-
tion).
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Emergency Key Removal
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
(Continued)
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks
and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security
Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the horn
will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three min-
utes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different.
Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
•
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if equipped,
refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP but-
ton (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Fob
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. Bat-
teries could contain dangerous materials. Please dispose of
them according to respect for environment and local laws.
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,
which will deal with their disposal.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Vehicle alarm system not active
• Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™
vehicle
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors
and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then,
prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not
present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn
the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Insert Key and Turn to Run” will display in the EVIC
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push
the START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect® SETTINGS. For more
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel.”
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock Knob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
If you push the door lock switch while the ignition
position is ACC or ON/RUN and the driver or front
passenger’s door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. press the electronic lift-
gate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open
with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch 2 — Lock Button Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you press
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you press the button on the liftgate For
further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY position.
The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Switches
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” move-
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, push to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
Auto Down Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condi-
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Auto Up Window Switches
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
push the Window Lockout button again.
Window Lockout Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in
Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you press
the button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you push the button on the liftgate For
further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only
lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into
the electronic liftgate handle
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release located handle
(refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™ located in
Things To Know Before Starting) or by pushing
the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Push the LIFTGATE button on the
RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the
power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch 2 — Lock Button Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front
overhead console, or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate
opening. Pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left
rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® Settings)
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further infor-
mation, refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding
Your Instrument Panel⬙.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
reset power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully
open the liftgate, and then push it again to close.
• If the liftgate handle switch is pushed while the power
liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full
open position.
• If the liftgate handle switch is pushed while the power
liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to
allow manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu-
ally.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• All seat belt systems (except the driver) include Auto-
matic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat
belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the
way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired
length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in
a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your
body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo-
men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Removing Slack From Belt
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Push the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into posi-
tion.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row
— Captains
Chair
ALR N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
Third Row ALR N/A ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize
when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step
three of the resetting procedure).
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
A — Downward Movement
B — Rearward Movement
C — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
Review Table Below
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
AHR In Reset Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase
the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the lap
belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug,
and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver
and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in
the center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s Advanced
Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the
glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed
on the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle is equipped with
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the
instrument panel below the steering column and a Knee
Bolster below the glove compartment.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their
covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Knee Bolster mounted below the
glove compartment.
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemen-
tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag, SABIC air bags, Supple-
mental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and front seat belt
pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of impact.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little vehicle
front-end damage but that produce a severe initial decel-
eration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de-
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags, and driver/passenger knee air bags may
deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the
communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON/RUN to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Tod-
dlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Con-
vertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are
still less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captains Chairs Second Row (6 passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit
(child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system
to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages
and the seat belt be used to-
gether to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed
in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
Can two child restraints be
attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Can the rear-facing child re-
straint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat
if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Yes Center position only may be removed.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
60/40 Seat LATCH Anchorages
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Captain’s Chairs
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Captains Chair LATCH Anchorages
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Second Row
60/40 And Third Row
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
1.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt
following the instructions below. See the section “Install-
ing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (7 passenger)
Captains Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes Center position only may be re-
moved
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchor-
ages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (60/40 Seat)
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear
doors open, make sure that all windows are closed
and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................124
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .124
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................124
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .125
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........131
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped ...........................131
▫ Power Mirrors .......................131
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........132
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped ...............133
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............133
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped ........134
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................134
▫ Rear Cross Path ......................140
▫ Modes Of Operation ...................141
▫ General Information....................142
3
䡵 SEATS ..............................143
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............144
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped ......146
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped ............147
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment ..................147
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline .................148
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped ...........................149
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............150
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......153
▫ Head Restraints .......................154
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat ..................159
▫ Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped.........162
▫ Folding Third Row ....................165
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .166
▫ Programming The Memory Feature .........168
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory .............169
▫ Memory Position Recall .................170
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................171
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........172
䡵 LIGHTS .............................173
▫ Headlight Switch .....................173
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......175
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .175
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ......175
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....177
▫ Headlight Delay ......................177
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights...........177
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............177
▫ Interior Lights ........................178
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................179
▫ Battery Saver.........................179
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .180
▫ Courtesy Lights .......................181
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped ............181
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................182
▫ Turn Signals .........................182
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................183
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................183
▫ High/Low Beam Switch.................183
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......183
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............184
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............184
▫ Windshield Washer Operation.............185
▫ Mist ...............................186
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........187
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .188
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED ...............189
䡵
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . .191
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................192
▫ To Activate ..........................193
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................193
▫ To Deactivate ........................194
▫ To Resume Speed .....................194
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............194
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................195
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................196
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .198
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .199
▫ To Activate/Deactivate..................200
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............201
▫ To Cancel ...........................202
▫ ToTurnOff..........................203
▫ To Resume ..........................203
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............204
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......206
▫ Overtake Aid ........................210
▫ ACC Operation At Stop .................210
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......211
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance ........212
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC .......215
▫ General Information ...................219
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode ..............................219
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ............223
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation ...................223
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF ...............225
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .226
▫ FCW Limited Warning ..................227
▫ Service FCW Warning ..................227
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................227
▫ ParkSense® Sensors ....................228
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display .............228
▫ ParkSense® Display ....................229
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........233
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................233
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........234
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......234
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................236
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................239
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .239
▫ Courtesy Lights .......................240
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door ...................241
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .241
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .243
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............243
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........246
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......247
▫ Using HomeLink®.....................248
▫ Security ............................248
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................249
▫ General Information....................250
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........250
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............251
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........252
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............252
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........252
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................252
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............252
▫ Sunshade Operation....................253
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................253
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................253
▫ Ignition OFF Operation .................253
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........254
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........259
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................260
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ..................260
▫ Rear Cupholders .....................261
䡵 STORAGE ............................263
▫ Glove Compartment ...................263
▫ Door Storage .........................263
▫ Front Center Console ...................264
▫ Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped .....264
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped . . . .268
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................269
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight .................269
▫ Cargo Storage .......................270
▫
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . . .271
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks .................271
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............273
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............273
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................274
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .275
▫ Deploying the Crossbars.................276
▫ Stowing The Crossbars..................279
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect® System.
– Press the controls soft-key.
– Press the Mirror Dimmer soft-key to turn the Auto-
matic Dimming Mirror on or off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
The mirror contains an Assist button and a 9–1–1 button
located on the bottom of the mirror.
Assist Call
The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push button
which automatically connects the vehicle occupants to
one of several predefined locations for immediate sup-
port:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access via Mo-
bile features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 opera-
tor may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1
operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connec-
tion.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and
9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ORC turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the air bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition key is in OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• Wireless network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is opera-
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown) BSM Warning Light
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP Detection Zones
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
be reduced.
NOTE:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power driver
and front passenger seats. The power seat switches are
located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted for-
ward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
the seat cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Adjustment Bar
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because
of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the
HIGH setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LOW setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the change. The
LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approxi-
mately 45 minutes.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 min-
utes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the
air from the passenger compartment and blow air
through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and
LOW.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose
HIGH.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LOW.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward
and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of
your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move
the head restraint away from your head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo.
To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head
Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo
could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden
stops. Failure to follow this warning could cause per-
sonal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust-
able. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push down-
ward on the head restraint to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head re-
straints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row
head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect® Sys-
tem.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of
the Uconnect® display.
Touch the Headrest Fold soft-key to
power fold the third row head
restraints.
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the Headrest Fold soft-key. The head restraints
must be raised manually when occupying the third
row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Release Lever
Tumble Strap
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Tumbled Second Row
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Release Lever
Tumble Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console there is
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
Release Handles
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full upright
position, or tumbled when folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer-
ing column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi-
tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Third Row Folded
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmit-
ters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
2.
Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences
(i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if equipped],
power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
3.
Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
to the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
• The Recall Memory with the “Memory To FOB” fea-
ture can be enabled through the Uconnect® system
screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features —
Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
4. Press and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 1 on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the power pedals
(if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will
occur before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move
about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the ignition
into the ACC or RUN position.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move to a
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the
driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in
(22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Hood Release
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Safety Latch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ-
ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlight Switch
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect® system. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the day-
time, the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and
decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed or
not. Refer to “Lights” in this section for further informa-
tion.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The automatic high beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam
control through the use of a digital camera mounted on
the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
of view.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE:
• If the windshield or automatic high beam mirror is
replaced, the automatic high beam mirror must be
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local
authorized dealer.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
function improperly.
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE: The headlight delay time is programmable
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off
when the switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight
switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is
selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
cle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
Fog Light Operation
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a second
time. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pressed.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
ity of the floor and center console area.
Courtesy Lights Ambient Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Multifunction Lever
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on
the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element On.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element Off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH/KM will appear indicating what speed was set. An
indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
•
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2
seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be
applied manually. An audible chime will sound
when the brakes are released.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-
plays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays
“ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pressed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pressed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing the SET - button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET + button or
SET - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to press the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting —
Increase button and release. Each time the button is pressed,
the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance Setting —
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pressed,
the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the
brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle ahead.
Brake Alert
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera-
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. Driver intervention will be
required at this moment.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Do-
ing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perfor-
mance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full function-
ality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a
key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a
side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of
travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate
unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, press the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead.
Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware
which mode is selected. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +
button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pressed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pressed.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the EVIC), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range,
the FCW system will be automatically deactivated.
FCW Message
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect® display.
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FCW Limited Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functional-
ity Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the ve-
hicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear in the EVIC indicating the vehicle speed is too
fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce a
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second
tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist Ready
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow Tone
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd
Solid
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever/gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled,
the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and the
system requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift
lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
ating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clus-
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever/gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the
EVIC will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia
radio display screen along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView®
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
License plate.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the center
of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Overhead Console Front Map/Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement.
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically.
This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close opera-
tion, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob and
element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet Front Center Console Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console,
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage
area of the rear full center console.
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be switched to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down.
Power Inverter
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Once the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
Front Cupholder Location
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholders
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the front of the rear full console.
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
Rear Full Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the front of the rear mini console.
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove box door.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Storage Compartment Latches
Storage Compartment
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on
with ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Upper Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted for-
ward. Push in the release button located on the back of
the lid.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage
compartment.
NOTE:
When the lower storage compartment is accessed it
allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat mode”. Fold
flat mode allows the console armrest to be lowered below
fold flat seat plane and protect the armrest vinyl from
damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Lower Storage Compartment
Fold Flat Mode
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
front of the console.
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner,
is located in the front of the console.
Console Cubby Bins
Console Cubby Bin
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Press And Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Cargo Storage
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Three-Press Switch
Load Floor Handle
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling.
To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury,
follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
(Continued)
Tie-Down Hooks
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mul-
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will con-
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Upon release of the switch, the wipers will resume the
continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary con-
trol is in the OFF position, rotating it downward will
activate the rear washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers
will cycle several times before returning to the parked
position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
Thumb Screw
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on
the side rail.
Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving
it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
deployment of the crossbars.
Positioning Crossbars Installing Crossbars
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stowing The Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot sup-
ports at each end.
Deployed Crossbars
Crossbar Pivot
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Stowing Crossbars
Crossbar To Side Rail
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interrup-
tion of satellite radio reception.
Tightening Crossbar Stowed Crossbars
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratchet-
ing mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........288
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................289
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....290
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................299
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ...........................301
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System ........303
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages ...........................304
▫ EVIC Amber Telltales ...................307
▫ EVIC Red Telltales .....................308
▫ EVIC Green Telltales ...................310
▫ EVIC White Telltales ...................310
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items .............311
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........316
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS....................317
▫ Hard-Keys ..........................318
▫ Soft-Keys ...........................319
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0 Settings..................319
4
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Settings ..........................339
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........358
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .359
䡵 Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................359
▫ Getting Started .......................360
▫ Dual Video Screen .....................362
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player ...................363
▫ Play Video Games .....................364
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio .....................365
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System .............................367
▫ Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped ...........................368
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries......369
▫ Headphones Operation .................370
▫ Controls ............................371
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries.........372
▫ Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty ...........................372
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................379
▫ Radio Operation ......................380
▫ CD Player ...........................381
䡵 CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE . . . .381
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .382
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................382
▫ General Overview .....................382
▫ Climate Control Functions ...............388
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......390
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ...........................391
▫ Operating Tips .......................396
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Lower Switch Bank 11 — Fuel Door Release
2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Hazard Switch 12 — Headlight Switch
3 — Radio 8 — ESC Button 13 — Dimmer Switch
4 — Glove Compartment 9 — Ignition Switch
5 — Climate Controls 10 — Hood Release
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
6. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa-
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
manual for more information.
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn
signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
A tone will chime, and an EVIC message will
appear if either turn signal is left on for more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
8. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
9. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa-
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
manual for more information.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced
if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
11. Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator — If
Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Parking
Brake system requires service.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
13. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
14. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle
where the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the
level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display/Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter” of your owners manual for more information.
17. Selectable EVIC Menu
This area of the cluster will display the EVIC selectable
menu. For further information, refer to “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your
owners manual for more information.
18. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” of your owners manual for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
19. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
22. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• MPH or KM/H
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP button to scroll up-
ward through the main menu.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menu.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu
from an info screen or sub-menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of multiple sections:
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa-
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure”.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Push Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On”.
Battery Saver Mode/Battery Saver On Message —
If Equipped
When the ⬙Battery Saver Mode⬙ or “Battery Saver On⬙
message is displayed, the vehicle will turn off certain
electrical functions to reduce battery energy consump-
tion. This will occur during periods when the battery is
not being adequately charged. During this time, the
following features (if equipped) may be turned off or will
operate at a reduced power level: heated seats and heated
steering wheel, heated or cooled cup-holder, rear de-
froster and heated mirrors, heating and air conditioning,
power inverter, audio and telematics system.
This condition is temporary and recoverable, this is for
driver information only.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the OK button.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following proce-
dure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key in Ignition
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Liftgate Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Amber Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-
TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
• Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped
This light warns the driver of a potential colli-
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the
collision. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If Equipped
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
EVIC Green Telltales
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. For further
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Con-
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
EVIC White Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Cruise Control Ready
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Adaptive Cruise Control
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON. For further
information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Speedometer
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Press the OK button to change the speedometer scale
from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
MPH To km/h
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button
until the MPH to km/h icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the OK button to change
the display between MPH or km/h
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press the RIGHT or LEFT arrow
button to scroll through the following informa-
tion sub-menus:
Tire Pressure
Press and release the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is displayed in the EVIC.
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Press and release the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button until
“Transmission Temperature” is displayed in the EVIC. It
shows transmission temperature value with bargraph.
Oil Temperature
Press and release the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button until
“Oil Temperature” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
Battery Voltage
Press and release the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button until
“Battery Voltage” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the battery voltage
will be displayed.
Oil Life
Press and release the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button until
“Oil Life” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release
the RIGHT arrow button and the current oil life will be
displayed.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure
Press and release the RIGHT or LEFT arrow button until
“Oil Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and the current oil
pressure will be displayed.
Driver Assist
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Driver Assist display icon is
highlighted in the EVIC. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is
highlighted.
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
L/100 km with Bargraph)
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Trip A
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
Trip B). The Trip A information will display the
following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Trip B
From the Trip A menu press and release the
Left or Right arrow button until the Trip B icon
is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or right
to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip B informa-
tion will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Stored Messages
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages display icon is high-
lighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pressing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
Screen Setup
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Press and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Once Speed Warning is entered, use the UP or DOWN
arrow buttons to adjust the Speed Warning. The Speed
Warning can be set in increments of 5 MPH and range
from 30-120 MPH. Once the desired speed is displayed,
press the OK button to set the speed. Press the LEFT
arrow button to exit to the main menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Current Gear
• On
• Off
Upper Left
• None
• Gear Display
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Upper Right
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Cancel
• Okay
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Uconnect® 5.0 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back hard-keys located below the system.
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time to
turn the screen on.
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.
Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
5.0 Settings
Press the SETTINGS hard-key to display the menu set-
ting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start,
Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth® and SiriusXM Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow soft-key or
the Back hard-key to return to the previous menu or press
the X soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature set-
tings may vary.
Display
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
will be available:
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the “Auto” or “Manual” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” soft-keys.
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness
with the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” soft-keys.
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Touch the “Set Language”
soft-key, then touch the desired language soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Never, With
Help or Always display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List, touch the “Never,” “With Help” or
“Always” soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” soft-key the following settings
will be available:
• Time and Format
When in this display, you may set the time and choose
the format to display the time. Touch the “12h,” “24h,”
“AM” or “PM” soft-key until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. If 24h is selected, AM/PM soft-keys will be greyed
out (unavailable).
• Sync Date
When in this display, you may choose to set the date
automatically. Touch the “Sync Date” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually.
Touch the “Set Date” soft-key until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, touch and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, touch the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. For further information,
refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitiga-
tion” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. To change the ParkSense® status, touch and
release the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display”
button. Then touch the back arrow soft-key. Refer to
“ParkSense®” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
“ParkSense® Front Chime Volume” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
“ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkSense® Park Assist Braking”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer
to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper-
ating information.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
start point. To make your selection, touch the “Lane
Departure Warning” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
your selection, touch the “Lane Departure Warning”
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever/gear
selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmis-
sion is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection,
touch the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
• Paddle Shifting
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel
paddle switches for shifting in manual mode. To make
your selection, touch the “Paddle Shifting” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When
Lights & Chime mode is activated, the Blind Spot Moni-
tor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors
as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on.
When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert
status, touch the “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime”
soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make
your selection, touch the “ParkView® Backup Camera”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display
whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire surround-
ings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this
note will disappear. To make your selection, touch the
“ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines” soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up
camera display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is
put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkView® Backup Camera Static
Gridlines” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the “Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance” soft-key. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” soft-key to turn the ParkView® Delay ON
or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield. To make your selection, touch the “Rain Sens-
ing” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key, until a check-mark ap-
pears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Brake Service
This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is in motion.
When this feature is selected, it will allow the service of
the rear brake components. To make your selection touch
the “Brake Service” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Auto Park Brake (automatic vehicles)
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automati-
cally set the Park Brake when the vehicle is shifted to
park. To make your selection, touch the “Auto Park
Brake” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Auto Park Brake (manual vehicles)
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automati-
cally set the Park Brake at key off. To make your selection,
touch the “Auto Park Brake” soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
• Hold ’n Go™
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will automati-
cally hold its position when it comes to a stop. To make
your selection, touch the “Hold ’n Go” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
• Interior Ambient Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the
brightness of the interior ambient lighting. To change the
Interior Ambient Lights setting, touch the “+” or “-” soft-key
to select your desired Interior Ambient Light level. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is
shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, touch
the “Headlights Off Delay” soft-key, and choose either 0, 30,
60 or 90 seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the “+” or “-” soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
ditions. To make your selection, touch the “Auto High
Beams” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Head-
lights with Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available:
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, touch the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must push
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Push
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Push Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Push Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-
grammed, touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
To make your selection, touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-
Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the “Memory
Linked To FOB” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Power Lift Gate Alert
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising
or lowering. To make your selection, touch the “Power Lift
Gate Alert” soft-key until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
soft-key the following settings will be available:
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, touch the “Auto
Heated Seats” soft-key, then select either “Off,” “Remote
Start” or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
• Easy Exit Seats
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” soft-key
and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
Compass Variance Map
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting
soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the
“+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
touch the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
• Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To
make your selection, touch the “Surround Sound” soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow soft-key.
• AUX Volume Match — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, touch the “AUX Volume Match”
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.
• Loudness — If Equipped
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, touch the “Loudness” soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow
soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS” Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
the back arrow soft-key.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Touch the “Subscription Info” soft-key to access the
Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
settings to their default setting touch the “Yes” or “No”
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when selected.
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Clear Personal Data
After touching the “Clear Personal Data Settings” soft-
key the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Personal
Data touch the “Yes” or “No” soft-key. A check mark will
appear in the box when selected. Then touch the back arrow
soft-key.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Settings
Press either the Apps or Controls soft-key, then press the
Settings soft-key to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, En-
gine Off Options, Compass, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth,
SiriusXM Setup and System Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Once the setting is complete either press the Back
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
previous menu or press the X soft-key to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys
on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up
or down through the available settings.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature set-
tings may vary.
Display
After pressing the “Display” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language
soft-key, then touch the desired language soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” soft-key the following settings
will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, touch
the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the” X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
• Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, touch and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, touch the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. For further information,
refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitiga-
tion” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
start point. To make your selection, touch the “Lane
Departure Warning” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
your selection, touch the “Lane Departure Warning”
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense® status, touch and release the “Sound Only”
or “Sounds and Display” button. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume — If Equipped
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
“ParkSense® Front Chime Volume” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume — If Equipped
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
is MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the
“ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its
last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkSense® Park Assist Braking”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer
to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper-
ating information.
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors
will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position
and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position.
The mirrors will move back to their previous position when
the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your
selection, touch the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Paddle Shifting — If Equipped
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel
paddle switches for shifting in manual mode. To make
your selection, touch the “Paddle Shifting” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in
your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be acti-
vated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights &
Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the “Off,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” soft-key. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkView Backup Camera” soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
touch the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up
camera display whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkView Backup Camera Static
Gridlines” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the
“Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” soft-key to turn the
ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
“Rain Sensing” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key, until a check-mark ap-
pears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the “Auto High Beams”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
“Lights / SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Head-
lights with Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available:
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, touch the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that the setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
door locks are activated. To make your selection, touch the
“Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must push
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Push
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Push Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Push Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-
grammed, touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If Driver’s Door first
is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior
door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors
(or use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-
N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-
hicle”.
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the “Memory
Linked To FOB” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
soft-key the following settings will be available:
• Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
turn on. To make your selection, touch the “Auto Heated
Seats” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After touching the “Engine Off Options” soft-key the
following settings will be available:
• Easy Exit Seats
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the “0 seconds,”
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials, such as iPod’s®, Mo-
bile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors, away from the
top of the instrument panel where the compass module is
located. These materials can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” soft-key
and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the
“+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
touch the “Off,” “1,” “2” or ”3” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the “Surround Sound”
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.
• AUX Volume Match — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To make your selection, touch the “AUX Volume Match”
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.
• Loudness — If Equipped
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, touch the “Loudness” soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow
soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After touching the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the
following settings will be available:
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS” Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
the back arrow soft-key.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Touch the “Subscription Info” soft-key to access the
Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
settings to their default setting touch the “Yes” or “No”
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Clear Personal Data
After touching the “Clear Personal Data Settings” soft-
key the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Per-
sonal Data touch the “Yes” or “No” soft-key. A check
mark will appear in the box when selected. Then touch
the back arrow soft-key.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the lower section of the front integrated center
stack, in front of the rotary shifter, this feature allows an
iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB
port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
ment Manual.
Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray™ Discs, listen to audio
over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety
of standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Center Console USB/AUX SD Card Media HUB
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc Player, the
icon will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by press-
ing the Power button on the remote control.
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-
ray™ Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
(passenger’s side).
Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control
Channel Selector
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occu-
pants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Headphone Channel
Selector
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is located in the center console.
To view a Blu-ray™ insert the disc into the Blu-ray™ Disc
Player. Playback will begin automatically after the Blu-ray™
Disc is recognized by the disc drive. If playback does not
begin automatically after the disc is inserted into Blu-ray™
Disc Player follow these steps:
Using The Touchscreen Radio
• Press the Media soft-key, then touch the Rear Media
soft key.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
Rear Media Control Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Touch the OK soft-key to begin playing the Blu-ray™
Disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen),
then press the source key and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input
2. Right audio in (red)
3. Left audio in (white)
4. Video in (yellow)
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player. The
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s
side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 2 (passen-
ger’s side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control
and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then press
ENTER/OK.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media soft-key on the Uconnect® radio
touchscreen.
2. Touch the Rear Media soft-key to display the Rear
Media Control screen.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key, the select source soft-key and
then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA column. To exit
touch the X at the top right of the screen.
NOTE: Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while
a DVD or Blu-ray™ Disc is playing, brings up the basic
remote control functions for DVD play such as scene
selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in
the upper corner will turn OFF the remote control screen
functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultane-
ously.
• The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray™ Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE — Press to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan-
nel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴 — Press to navigate menus.
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. SETUP — Press to access the screen settings menu.
7. 䉴䉴 — Press and hold to fast forward through the
current audio track or video chapter.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc
play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Press to access Blu-ray™ Disc
features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Press to bring up repeat and
shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc popup menu, the
DVD title menu or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD — Press to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
13. 䉳䉳 — Press and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14. Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Press to exit out of menus or return to
source selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Press to navigate menus.
17. OK — Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
18. 䉳 — Press to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 — Press to navigate menus.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control.
3. Pressing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi-
gate to the available modes and press the OK button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® re-
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appear-
ance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circum-
stances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navi-
gation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Video Screen Display Settings
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically se-
lect the next available audio mode without using the
Mode/Source Select menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of the playing the
following types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions3–6)
profile 3.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray™ Disc player and many DVD discs are
coded by geographic region. These region codes must
match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for
the DVD disc does not match the region code for the
player, the disc will not play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray™ Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW
discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re-
corded) are not supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc player may not be able
to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
lines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and
99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
• The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file exten-
sion to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
always end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and
WMA files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙
or ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray™ player will automatically skip the file
and begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray™
player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
ing the next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
Blu-ray™ Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the
next file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the
current or previous file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
⬙Disc Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and
Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc
format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray™
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of
the disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will return to
the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during ex-
tremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s inte-
rior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this
occurs, the player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics
of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-
wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect®
(if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make
you comfortable in all types of weather. This system can be
operated through either the controls on the instrument panel
or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger tem-
perature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.
General Overview
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And
Soft-Keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for warmer tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-
key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
10. SYNC
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
as follows:
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Soft-Key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-
key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-
key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
16. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0 Radio Only)
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera-
ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
area indicates cooler temperatures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Con-
trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircula-
tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se-
lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the Uconnect® customer-
programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® Sys-
tem Settings” in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control soft-keys are located
in the Uconnect® touch system, located on the instru-
ment panel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1 — Blower Up Soft-Key 5 — Done Soft-Key
2 — Mode Soft-Key 6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
3 — Temperature Soft-Key 7 — Rear Auto Soft-Key
4 — Blower Down Soft-Key 8 — Rear Off Soft-Key
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Soft-Key
Controls Screen
1 — Rear Auto Soft-Key 6 — Blower Up Soft-Key
2 — Rear Lock Soft-Key 7 — Mode Soft-Key
3 — Front Climate Soft-Key 8 — Blower Down Soft-Key
4 — Temperature Up Soft-Key 9 — Rear Off Soft-Key
5—
Temperature Down Soft-Key
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear control
mode, Rear display will appear. Control functions now
operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press ⬙REAR⬙ button again,
or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect® touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are con-
trolled from the front Uconnect® system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear MODE
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Temperature Lock
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect® touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Tem-
perature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automati-
cally adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the
second row seat occupants have control of the rear
blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
(Continued)
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the
second row seat occupants have control of the rear
temperature control knob.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
• The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat
occupants.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................404
▫ Automatic Transmission ................405
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ..................406
▫ Normal Starting.......................406
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) ................408
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................408
▫ After Starting ........................409
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .409
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............410
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............412
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .412
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ..............412
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission .......413
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..........422
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
(3.6L Engine) — If Equipped .............422
▫
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Three-Position
Switch) (5.7L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Shifting Procedure .....................427
5
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................429
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS ................430
▫ When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped . . . .430
▫ Driving Through Water .................430
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..........431
▫ Hill Climbing ........................432
▫ Traction Downhill .....................433
▫ After Driving Off-Road .................433
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................434
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................434
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................435
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............437
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED ..................438
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................438
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .440
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............441
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............441
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............442
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........443
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........443
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............446
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................447
▫ Ready Alert Braking ...................449
▫ Rain Brake Support ....................449
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................450
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............451
▫ Tire Markings ........................451
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........455
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........456
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........458
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........462
▫ Tire Pressure ........................462
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................464
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .465
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................465
▫ Tire Types ...........................466
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............467
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............468
▫ Tire Spinning ........................470
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................471
▫ Life Of Tire .........................471
▫ Replacement Tires .....................472
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......474
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....475
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .476
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ...........479
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings ...........................480
▫ SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning ..........481
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
▫ General Information ...................483
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................484
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped...............484
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped...............484
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................485
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............485
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......486
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................486
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................487
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................487
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............488
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................488
▫ E-85 General Information ...............488
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................489
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................489
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .............490
▫ Starting ............................491
▫ Cruising Range .......................491
▫ Replacement Parts ....................491
▫ Maintenance ........................491
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................492
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........494
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................495
▫ Certification Label ....................495
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................498
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............498
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............501
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................502
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If
Equipped ...........................503
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............505
▫ Towing Requirements ..................506
▫ Towing Tips .........................511
䡵 SNOW PLOW .........................512
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................513
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .513
▫ Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
Models .............................514
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) ..............514
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) ...............515
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before
you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting
into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
“ACC”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
display “ON/RUN”),
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
display “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3.
Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition switch is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
(Continued)
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK when-
ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehi-
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Each time the vehicle is started ECO mode is
engaged and a amber light in the center stack of the
instrument panel will be illuminated. To disable ECO
mode, press the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and the amber light will go out indi-
cating ECO mode is disabled.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The overall driving performance will be more conser-
vative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib-
ited based on temperature and other factors.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
sion gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear
selector. You must press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission
Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past
multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE),
simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, RE-
VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
(shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing
the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE range will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display
the current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to
AutoStick® in this section for further information.
Electronic Gear Selector
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition switch is in the OFF position remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must start the engine and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the electronically
shifted transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in
AWD AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD
Control Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light
is NOT illuminated.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that you
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to AutoStick® in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm. Normal operation will resume once the trans-
mission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick®
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa-
tions.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE, it will operate
automatically, shifting between the eight available gears.
To engage AutoStick®, simply tap one of the steering
wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter
AutoStick® will downshift the transmission to the next
lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick® will
retain the current gear. When AutoStick® is active, the
current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
result.
It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding
the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the trans-
mission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until ⬙D⬙ is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick®
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
(3.6L Engine) — If Equipped
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time all-
wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) — If
Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the
center console.
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shift-
ing instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the EVIC
(Electronic Vehicle Information Center) and indicate the
current and desired transfer case selection. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When you select a different transfer case position,
the position indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means
that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning prop-
erly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
AWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
WARNING! (Continued)
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
AWD Auto
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to
the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
LOW Range
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear drive-
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Neutral (N)
Neutral – This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift.
The position indicator light for the previous position will
remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash until all the requirements for the
selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return
the control knob back to the original position, make
certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five
seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
AWD Auto To Low Range
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in ON/ RUN position and
engine running, shift the transmission to Neutral.
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
in process, the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the RUN
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4.
Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the
recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located by
the selector switch) for four seconds. The light next to the
N symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “4WD System in Neutral”
message will display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle
Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To Tow
Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners
Manual” message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto-
rily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Neutral Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa-
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
LOW range.
CAUTION!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering, as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami-
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to pre-
vent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control
at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and
shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer to “All-
Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving the
engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, be-
cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
gear and LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back care-
fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compres-
sion drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis-
sion whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-
hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri-
cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the
vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon
are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
5.7L Engine
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully.
To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal
a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate and the EVIC will
display “Parking Brake Engaged”.
NOTE:
• If vehicle speed is detected, and the parking brake is
applied a chime will sound and the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash to alert the driver. Fully release the
parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING! (Continued)
•
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and
Rain Brake Support.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions,
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capa-
bilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator” located in the
instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator” also flashes when the
TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelera-
tor and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
AWD AUTO range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and
one operating mode in AWD LOW range.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTO Range (All-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD
AUTO range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever
the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
AWD AUTO range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
ESC OFF Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it
may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by
pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the situation requiring
ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF”
switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
•
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
AWD Low Range (LOW)
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD LOW
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
AWD AUTO range or NEUTRAL to AWD LOW range,
the ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this sec-
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Uconnect® Settings. Refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety
• Economy
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the “all
season” designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Re-
placement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the THULE XG-12 PRO
traction device or equivalent is recommended on
P265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Rotation
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
turned off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum
of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate Tire to XXX⬙ message and a
graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
displayed in a different color. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI or kPa.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire
pressure displayed in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XXX⬙ message.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of
the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the EVIC will still display a pressure value in
the different color graphic display and an ⬙Inflate to
XXX kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After driving the
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ mes-
sage for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition
switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using high-
quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having
an octane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum
performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a
manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into
some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with
MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of
the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended
with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions
system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohib-
ited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain
effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or
other additives is not needed under normal conditions and
they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should
not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation sys-
tem to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
E-85 Badge
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling.
• You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
FCA US LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an equivalent oil
meeting the specification MS-6395.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Fuel Filler Door
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the
fuel door latch to the closed position.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
Release Cable
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor-
mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La-
bel” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other
connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
the most popular on the market today and they are com-
monly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch In-
dustry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine Model
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
3.6L RWD 11,600 lbs
(5 262 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2 812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L AWD 11,600 lbs
(5 262 kg)
40 sq ft
(3.72 sq m)
6,200 lbs
(2 812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L RWD 13,100 lbs
(5 942 kg)
60 sq ft
(5.57 sq m)
7,400 lbs
(3 357 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
5.7L AWD 13,100 lbs
(5 942 kg)
60 sq ft
(5.57 sq m)
7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for further informa-
tion. The addition of passengers and cargo may require
reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be nec-
essary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of 3,900 lbs (1 769 kg).
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch re-
ceiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward
(towards you).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at the
top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in
reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
Hitch Receiver Cover Retainers
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainer
Hitch Receiver Cover
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maxi-
mum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-
formation Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for fur-
ther information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4.
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection proce-
dure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
AutoStick®
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condi-
tion
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Rear-
Wheel
Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Transfer
Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED
• See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational tow-
ing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicle. Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a dolly is used when
recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL(N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lo-
cated by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information
Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
5. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
8. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEU-
TRAL, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button until the engine turns off. Turning the engine
off will automatically place the transmission in
PARK.
11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button again (with-
out pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before press-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (lo-
cated by the selector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine
OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before press-
ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........523
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............523
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................524
▫ Torque Specifications ...................524
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........526
▫ Jack Location ........................526
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................527
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................528
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................531
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................531
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................539
䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL ............540
䡵 JUMP-STARTING ......................541
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............541
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................543
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............545
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................547
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
Jack Storage Location
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
Thumb Screw Location
Spare Tire Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the
winch stops.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear bumper.
5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
Spare Tire
Tab Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push
it through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
Sleeve And Cable
Releasing Protective Plate
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking posi-
tion. For example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
WARNING! (Continued)
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jack And Tool Assembly
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jack Location
Lift Point On Sill Molding
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to Torque
Specifications in this section for proper lug nut torque.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
Mounting Spare Tire
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the “beauty side”
facing rearward.
NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel from
being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective
plate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end
of the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped
cone shape wheel plate though the road wheel and
protective plate.
“Beauty Side”
Installing Winch
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protec-
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat
shields. Raise the tire by turn the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mecha-
nism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools
in the bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro
straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug
wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the
jack on the bracket by turning the thumb screw
clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
in the rear storage bin.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire,
jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with
the jack and tire changing tools. If your vehicle is out of
fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel
into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer
to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” in this
manual.
Fuel Funnel
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen-
ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested
at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC Off⬙
switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
Release Latch
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simulta-
neously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission and the armrest.
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
Released Position
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
Release Latch
Stowed Position
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmis-
sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also
be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the
“Starting and Operating” section.
Towing Con-
dition
Wheels
OFF the
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Mod-
els With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
Flat Tow NONE If Transmission Is
Operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED See Instructions:
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Rear Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground at more than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more
than 30 mi (48 km), can cause severe transmission
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels on the ground.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEU-
TRAL and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed
instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........557
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L ..........558
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .559
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............559
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................560
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................561
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................562
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........562
▫ Engine Oil ..........................563
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................566
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................566
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............567
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............568
▫ Body Lubrication .....................573
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............573
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................575
▫ Exhaust System ......................576
▫ Cooling System ......................579
▫ Brake System ........................585
7
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid ..................587
▫ Transfer Case ........................588
▫ Automatic Transmission ................589
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................591
䡵 FUSES ..............................598
▫ Power Distribution Center ...............599
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................606
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................607
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................609
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon)
— If Equipped .......................609
▫ Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped ......610
▫ Front Turn Signal .....................611
▫ Front Fog Lamps .....................611
▫ Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps ......612
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps ......612
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .612
▫ Rear License Lamp ....................612
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................613
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS ......................614
▫ Engine .............................614
▫ Chassis .............................615
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Remote Jump Start Terminals 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Air Filter Cleaner 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper-
ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem-
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for further information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
WARNING! (Continued)
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air
Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
• Do not remove the A/C air filter while the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position or personal injury may
result.
• Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door, partially close
the glove compartment door and push inward to
release the glove compartment travel stop on one side
and repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the
glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compart-
ment door.
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining
tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
the HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on
the right side to fully remove the cover.
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove com-
partment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in
the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage
the glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
1—WiperBlade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immedi-
ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If
gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
cast iron housings.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
the following chart.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow Rad Fan
F05 40 Amp Green Compressor for Air Suspension - If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F08 40 Amp Green Emission Sensors (Diesel engine only)
F09 40 Amp Green Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)
F10 40 Amp Green Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green Body Controller #3 / Interior Lights
F13 40 Amp Green Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green Body Controller #4 / Power Locks
F17 30 Amp Pink Headrest Release - If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink Body Controller #1
F24 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink Antilock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F29 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink Slip Differential Control
F35 30 Amp Pink Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster
F37 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower - If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate - If Equipped
F40 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights
F42 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor - If Equipped
F49 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F50 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Module / Electronic Limited Slip
Differentials - If Equipped
F51 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition / Steer-
ing Column Lock
F52 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If Equipped
F56 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
F57 15 Amp Blue Transmission
F59 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
F60 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F62 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 25 Amp Natural Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F66 10 Amp Red
Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F67 15 Amp Blue CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module - If
Equipped
F68 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F70 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 30 Amp Green Audio Amplifier
F73 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps Right
F74 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
F76 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect
Module
F78 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering -
If Equipped
F80 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass / Anti-
Intrusion Module
F81 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F82 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise Control
F83 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 10 Amp Red Air Suspension – If Equipped/ Trailer Tow /
Steering Column Control Module
F88 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
F92 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
F93 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger - If
Equipped
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F97 25 Amp Natural Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel - If
Equipped
F98 25 Amp Natural Front Heated Seats / Ventilated Seats - If Equipped
F99 10 Amp Red
Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems Module
F100 10 Amp Red Active Damping - If Equipped
F101 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams - If
Equipped
F103 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel engine only)
F104 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Box Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Service at Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam/Daytime Running Lamp HIR2
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Bulb Number
(DRL) Bi-Halogen Headlamps (Base)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
(Uplevel)
HIR2
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Base) 3157NAK
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Uplevel & Premium) 3157NAK
Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp (Uplevel &
Premium)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon)
— If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a
headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin-
ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Turn the steering wheel to the left to replace the bulb
from the right hand lamp, or to the right to replace the
bulb from the left hand lamp.
2. Turn the access cap located on the wheel liner coun-
terclockwise to remove from liner.
3. Locate the headlamp bulb access cap through the
opening in the wheel liner.
4. Firmly grasp the access cap and rotate counterclock-
wise to remove lamp housing.
5. Firmly grasp the low/high beam bulb and connector
assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from
housing.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector and then connect
the replacement bulb.
7. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
8. Install the bulb access cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
9. Install the access cap in the wheel liner and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp
housing.
2. Remove the bulb from the connector and install the
replacement bulb.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
CAUTION!
•
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See
your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) coun-
ter clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized
dealer for replacement.
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 25 Gallons 94 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With-
out Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) – With
Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the require-
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Power Steering Reservoir –
3.6L Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid.
Power Steering Reservoir –
5.7L Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, or MOPAR®
ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5 600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16 000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
618 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 619
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your ve-
hicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-
road or frequent trailer towing.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
XXX X X X X
Adjust parking brake. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
620 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs (3.6L en-
gine).**
X
Replace spark plugs (5.7L en-
gine).**
X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Change transfer case fluid. X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 621
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................625
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............625
▫ Prepare A List ........................625
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............625
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............625
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............626
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........626
▫ In Mexico Contact:.....................627
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................627
▫ Service Contract ......................627
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............628
䡵 MOPAR®PARTS.......................629
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............629
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. .629
▫ In Canada ...........................629
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............630
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 627
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
628 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 629
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
630 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .196
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............581
Adding Fuel .............................492
Additives, Fuel ...........................487
Airbag ...............................69, 79
Airbag Deployment ........................80
Airbag Light ....................77, 83, 113, 297
Airbag Maintenance ........................82
Airbag, Side ......................72, 75, 78, 79
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........73, 75, 79
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .566
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................568
Air Conditioning Filter ..................397, 570
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............398
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone .................391
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............568, 569
Air Conditioning System.................390, 568
Air Pressure, Tires.........................464
Alarm
Arm The System ........................21
Disarm The System .......................22
Tamper Alert ...........................23
Alarm, Panic .............................26
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................20, 298
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................422
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............580, 613
Disposal ..............................583
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................441
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................290
Appearance Care .........................591
Assist, Hill Start ..........................447
Auto Down Power Windows ..................43
Automatic Headlights ......................175
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........390
Automatic Transmission .................413, 590
Adding Fluid ..........................590
634 INDEX
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................590
Fluid Change ..........................590
Fluid Level Check ...................589, 590
Fluid Type ............................589
Gear Ranges ...........................415
Special Additives .......................589
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........254
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................254
Battery .............................303, 567
Charging .............................303
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........27
Belts, Seat ............................54, 113
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................134
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................573
B-Pillar Location ..........................458
Brake Assist System .......................442
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............440
Brake Fluid .............................585
Brake System ............................585
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................441
Fluid Check ...........................585
Master Cylinder ........................585
Parking ..............................438
Warning Light .........................293
Brake/Transmission Interlock .................412
Bulb Replacement......................607, 609
Bulbs, Light .............................115
Camera, Rear ............................236
Capacities, Fluid ..........................613
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................540
Oil (Engine) ...........................565
Power Steering .........................437
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................582
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............112,488
Cargo Area Cover .........................271
10
INDEX 635
Cargo Area Features .......................269
Cargo Compartment .......................269
Light ................................270
Luggage Carrier ........................275
Cargo Light .............................270
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................271
Car Washes .............................591
Cellular Phone ...........................382
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............612
Certification Label.........................495
Chains, Tire .............................474
Changing A Flat Tire .......................526
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................453
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .560
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............111
Checks, Safety............................111
Child Restraint ............................84
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation ....................104
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint .....99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt .................................101
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......91
Child Safety Locks .........................35
Clean Air Gasoline ........................485
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................593
Climate Control ..........................382
Cold Weather Operation ....................408
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............381
Compact Spare Tire........................468
Console, Overhead ........................239
Contract, Service ..........................627
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........582
Cooling System...........................579
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............581
Coolant Capacity .......................613
Coolant Level ..........................583
636 INDEX
Disposal of Used Coolant .................583
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................580
Inspection .........................579, 583
Points to Remember .....................584
Pressure Cap ..........................582
Radiator Cap ..........................582
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .........580, 613
Corrosion Protection .......................591
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................196
Cupholders ..........................260, 261
Customer Assistance .......................625
Data Recorder, Event .......................83
Daytime Running Lights ....................177
Dealer Service............................562
Defroster, Rear Window.....................274
Defroster, Windshield ......................113
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...........................563
Power Steering .........................437
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................551
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................583
Door Locks ..............................33
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......35
Door Locks ..........................33, 35
KeyFob...............................33
Remote ...............................33
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................33
Door Opener, Garage.......................241
Driving ................................429
E-85 Fuel ...............................488
Economy (Fuel) Mode ......................412
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ........254
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................274
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................131
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case.............422
10
INDEX 637
Electronic Brake Control System ...............440
Brake Assist System .....................442
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............443
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....192, 196
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............443
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Instrument Cluster Display .................32
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .297, 299
Change Engine Oil ......................303
Change Engine Oil Indicator System ..........303
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .299
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup
Menu ................................299
EVIC Display ..........................301
EVIC Messages ..................299, 301, 304
Remote Start ...........................32
Selectable Menu Items ....................311
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................545
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................523
Jacking ...............................526
Jump Starting ..........................541
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........560
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................566
Block Heater ..........................409
Break-In Recommendations ................110
Compartment .......................557, 558
Compartment Identification .............557, 558
Cooling ..............................579
Exhaust Gas Caution ...............50, 112, 488
Fails to Start ...........................408
Flooded, Starting .......................408
Fuel Requirements ...................484, 613
Jump Starting ..........................541
Oil ..............................563, 613
Oil Filler Cap ..........................565
Oil Selection .......................564, 613
638 INDEX
Overheating ...........................523
Starting ..............................404
Temperature Gauge ......................293
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................565
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................565
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............80
Entry System, Illuminated ....................23
Ethanol ................................485
Event Data Recorder ........................83
Exhaust Gas Caution .................50, 112, 488
Exhaust System .......................112,576
Exterior Lights ...........................115
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................566
Air Conditioning ....................397, 570
Engine Oil ............................566
Engine Oil Disposal .....................566
Flashers ................................523
Hazard Warning ........................523
Turn Signal ..................115,291, 611, 612
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................491
Engine Oil ............................490
Fuel Requirements ...................488, 489
Maintenance ...........................491
Replacement Parts .......................491
Starting ..............................491
Flooded Engine Starting ....................408
Fluid Capacities ..........................613
Fluid Leaks .............................115
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................590
Brake ................................585
Engine Oil ............................563
Power Steering .........................437
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........614
Fog Lights ...........................291, 611
10
INDEX 639
Fog Light Service .........................611
Folding Rear Seat .........................159
Forward Collision Warning ..................223
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................523
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................545
Front Axle (Differential).....................587
Fuel...................................484
Adding ..............................492
Additives .............................487
Clean Air .............................485
Economy Mode ........................412
Ethanol ..............................485
Gasoline ..............................484
Gauge ...............................295
Materials Added ........................487
Methanol .............................485
Octane Rating ..........................484
Requirements .......................484, 613
Tank Capacity ..........................613
Fuel, Flexible ............................488
Fueling ................................492
Fuses ..................................598
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............241
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................559
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................485
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................484
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................485
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................293
Fuel .................................295
Speedometer ..........................291
Tachometer ............................290
Gear Ranges .............................415
General Information ....................219, 483
Glass Cleaning ...........................596
Gross
Axle Weight Rating ...................499
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................498
640 INDEX
GVWR .................................495
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................523
Headlights ..............................609
Automatic ............................175
Bulb Replacement .......................610
Cleaning .............................596
On With Wipers ........................175
Passing ..............................183
Replacing .............................610
Heated Mirrors .......................132, 274
Heater, Engine Block .......................409
High Beam Indicator .......................290
Hill Start Assist...........................447
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................501
Holder, Cup .............................261
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............241
Hood Release ............................172
Ignition
Key..................................14
Illuminated Entry ..........................23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................18
Infant Restraint ...........................84
Information Center, Vehicle ..................299
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................124, 125
Instrument Cluster ........................290
Instrument Panel and Controls ................288
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............597
Interior Appearance Care....................595
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............184
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter, Power ...........................259
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .........531
Jacking Instructions........................531
10
INDEX 641
Jack Location ............................526
Jack Operation ........................526, 531
Jump Starting ............................541
KeyFob.................................15
Arm The Alarm .........................21
Disarm The Alarm .......................22
Panic Alarm ............................26
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........20, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters .......20, 26
Unlock Liftgate .........................46
Key-In Reminder ..........................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go .....................37, 406
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ ..................37
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..............332, 351
Passive Entry ...........................37
Passive Entry Programming ..........37, 332, 351
Unlock Liftgate ...................46, 332, 351
Keyless Entry System .......................24
Keyless Go...............................14
Key, Replacement ..........................19
Keys ...................................14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................18
Lane Change Assist........................183
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................54
Latches ................................115
Lead Free Gasoline ........................484
Leaks, Fluid .............................115
Life of Tires .............................471
Liftgate .................................46
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............273
Light Bulbs..............................115
Lights ..............................115,173
Airbag .......................77, 83, 113, 297
Anti-Lock .............................290
Automatic Headlights ....................175
642 INDEX
Brake Assist Warning ....................450
Brake Warning .........................293
Bulb Replacement .......................609
Cargo ...............................270
Center Mounted Stop ....................612
Daytime Running .......................177
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................173
Exterior ..............................115
Fog..............................291, 611
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................523
Headlights .........................609, 610
Headlights On With Wipers ................175
High Beam Indicator .....................290
Illuminated Entry ........................23
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........291
Map Reading ..........................180
Passing ..............................183
Reading ...........................180, 239
Rear Servicing .........................612
Rear Tail .............................612
Seat Belt Reminder ......................290
Security Alarm .........................298
Service ...............................609
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .291
Side Marker ...........................612
SmartBeams ...........................175
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............295
Traction Control ........................450
Turn Signal ..................115,173, 611, 612
Vanity Mirror ..........................133
Loading Vehicle ..........................495
Tires ................................458
Locks ..................................33
Child Protection .........................35
Door .................................33
Power Door ............................34
Lubrication, Body .........................573
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ...................275
10
INDEX 643
Lug Nuts ...............................524
Maintenance Free Battery....................567
Maintenance Procedures ....................562
Maintenance Schedule ......................618
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .291, 560
Manual, Service ..........................630
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............166
Memory Seat ............................166
Memory Seats and Radio ....................166
Methanol ...............................485
Mirrors ................................124
Electric Powered ........................131
Electric Remote .........................131
Exterior Folding ........................131
Heated ...............................132
Outside ..............................124
Rearview ..........................124, 125
Vanity ...............................133
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................476
Mopar Parts..........................561, 629
MTBE/ETBE ............................485
Multi-Function Control Lever .................173
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................110
Occupant Restraints ...................50, 75, 80
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ...........72, 73, 75, 79
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................484
Odometer...............................297
Trip.................................297
Oil, Engine ..............................563
Capacity .............................613
Change Interval ........................564
Dipstick ..............................563
Disposal ..............................566
Filter ................................566
644 INDEX
Filter Disposal .........................566
Identification Logo ......................564
Materials Added to ......................566
Recommendation ....................564, 613
Viscosity ..........................565, 613
Oil Filter, Selection ........................566
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................559
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............241
Operating Precautions ......................559
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............6
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................124
Overhead Console.........................239
Overheating, Engine ....................293, 523
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........6,630
Paint Care ..............................591
Panic Alarm ..............................26
Parking Brake............................438
ParkSense® System, Rear....................227
Passing Light ............................183
Passive Entry .............................37
Pets ...................................110
Pets, Transporting .........................110
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........458
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................599
Door Locks ............................34
Inverter ..............................259
Lift Gate ..............................47
Mirrors ..............................131
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........254
Seats .............................144, 146
Steering ...........................434, 437
Sunroof ..............................250
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............189
Windows ..............................42
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................68
Preparation for Jacking .....................531
10
INDEX 645
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................62
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Quadra-Trac .............................422
Radial Ply Tires ..........................465
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........582
Radio Operation ..........................382
Radio Remote Controls .....................379
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................187
Rear Air Conditioning ......................391
Rear Axle (Differential) .....................587
Rear Camera ............................236
Rear Cross Path ..........................140
Rear Cupholder ..........................261
Rear ParkSense System .....................227
Rear Seat, Folding .........................159
Rear Window Features .....................273
Rear Wiper/Washer........................273
Reclining Front Seats .......................148
Recorder, Event Data .......................83
Recreational Towing .......................513
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ........516
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ......519
Reformulated Gasoline .....................485
Refrigerant ..............................569
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................67
Remote Control
Starting System .........................29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................24
Arm The Alarm .........................21
Disarm The Alarm .......................22
FCC General Information ..................28
Panic Alarm ............................26
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........20, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters .......20, 26
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........379
646 INDEX
Remote Starting
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message ............30
Exit Remote Start Mode .................31, 32
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................32
Uconnect® Customer Programmable
Features ........................32, 334, 353
Uconnect® Settings ................32, 334, 353
Remote Starting System......................29
Replacement Bulbs ........................607
Replacement Keys .........................19
Replacement Parts.........................561
Replacement Tires .........................472
Reporting Safety Defects ....................629
Restraints, Child...........................84
Restraints, Occupant ........................50
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ................271
Roll Over Warning ..........................5
Roof Type Carrier .........................275
Rotation, Tires ...........................475
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................113
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................115
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................629
Safety, Exhaust Gas .....................50, 112
Safety Information, Tire .....................451
Safety Tips ..............................111
Schedule, Maintenance .....................618
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................597
Seat Belt Reminder .........................67
Seat Belts.............................54, 113
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........59
And Pregnant Women .....................68
Child Restraint ..........................84
Extender ..............................68
Front Seat .............................54
Inspection ............................113
Pretensioners ...........................62
10
INDEX 647
Reminder .............................290
Shoulder Belt Anchorage ...................59
Untwisting Procedure .....................58
Seats ...............................143, 144
Adjustment ...........................147
Easy Entry ............................171
Memory ..............................166
Power ...............................146
Rear Folding ..........................159
Reclining .............................148
Security Alarm.........................20, 298
Arm The System ........................21
Disarm The System .......................22
Tamper Alert ...........................23
Security System ...........................20
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................20
Key Programming .......................20
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................18
Sentry Key Replacement .....................19
Service Assistance .........................625
Service Contract ..........................627
Service Manuals ..........................630
Shifting ................................410
Automatic Transmission ...............410, 413
Shoulder Belts ............................54
Side Airbag ..............................78
Signals, Turn ...................115,291, 611, 612
SmartBeams .............................175
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................474
Snow Plow..............................512
Snow Tires ..............................467
Spare Tire ........................468, 469, 527
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............192, 196
Speedometer.............................291
Starting..............................29, 404
Automatic Transmission ..................405
Cold Weather .......................408, 409
648 INDEX
Engine Block Heater .....................409
Engine Fails to Start .....................408
Remote ...............................29
Starting and Operating .....................404
Starting Procedures ........................404
Steering
Power ............................434, 437
Tilt Column ........................188, 189
Wheel, Heated .........................191
Wheel, Tilt .........................188, 189
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............379
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .379
Storage ................................606
Storage, Vehicle .......................396, 606
Storing Your Vehicle .......................606
Sunglasses Storage ........................241
Sun Roof ...............................250
Sun Visor Extension .......................134
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........69
Sway Control, Trailer.......................446
System, Remote Starting .....................29
Tachometer..............................290
Telescoping Steering Column..............188, 189
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........390
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............293
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................271
Tilt Steering Column....................188, 189
Tire and Loading Information Placard...........458
Tire Markings ............................451
Tires............................115,462, 631
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................471
Air Pressure ...........................462
Chains ...............................474
Changing .............................526
Compact Spare .........................468
General Information .....................462
High Speed ...........................465
10
INDEX 649
Inflation Pressures .......................464
Jacking ...............................526
Life of Tires ...........................471
Load Capacity ......................458, 459
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............476
Pressure Warning Light ...................295
Quality Grading ........................631
Radial ...............................465
Replacement ...........................472
Rotation ..............................475
Safety ............................451, 462
Sizes ................................453
Snow Tires ............................467
Spare Tire .............................527
Spinning .............................470
Trailer Towing .........................508
Tread Wear Indicators ....................471
Tire Safety Information .....................451
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................505
Towing .............................498, 551
Disabled Vehicle ........................551
Guide ...............................502
Recreational ...........................513
Weight ...............................502
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........513
Traction Control ..........................441
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................446
Trailer Towing ...........................498
Cooling System Tips .....................512
Hitches ..............................501
Minimum Requirements ..................506
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................505
Wiring ...............................509
Trailer Towing Guide.......................502
Trailer
Weight ............................502
Transfer Case ............................588
Electronically Shifted .....................422
Maintenance ...........................588
650 INDEX
Transmission ............................413
Automatic .........................413, 589
Maintenance ...........................589
Shifting ..............................410
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .241
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)..................24, 26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........24
Tread Wear Indicators ......................471
Turn Signals ......................291, 611, 612
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features ......32, 334, 353
Screen Activated Features ..................25
Uconnect® Settings .............26, 32, 334, 353
Uconnect® Settings
Customer Programmable Features ............25
Customer Programmable Features
. .35, 37, 46, 332, 351
Passive Entry Programming .....35, 37, 46, 332, 351
Uconnect® Settings ................46, 332, 351
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................631
Universal Transmitter ......................241
Unleaded Gasoline ........................484
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................58
Vanity Mirrors ...........................133
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............8
Vehicle Loading .......................459, 495
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............9
Vehicle Storage........................396, 606
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................565
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................523
Warning, Roll Over .........................5
Warnings and Cautions.......................8
Warranty Information ......................628
Washers, Windshield....................183, 575
10
INDEX 651
Washing Vehicle ..........................591
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................593
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................593
Wind Buffeting ........................46, 253
Window Fogging .........................397
Windows ................................42
Power ................................42
Wind Buffeting ..........................46
Windshield Defroster.......................113
Windshield Washers .......................183
Fluid ................................575
Windshield Wiper Blades....................573
Windshield Wipers ........................183
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................573
Wipers, Intermittent .......................184
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................187
652 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 201
7 FCA US LLC
Durango
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014
14WD01-126-AE Fifth Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
